Dodge 2010 Dakota Owner`s manual

2010
OWNE R ’ S MANUAL
Dakota
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet,
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented
documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is located on
the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle.
Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Locking Doors With A Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel . . . . . . 15
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks . . . 20
䡵 Sentry Key威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Auto-Down — Driver’s Side Only . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 25
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 26
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 42
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped . . . . . . 44
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) –
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . .
▫ Advanced Front Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 52
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 74
11
. . . . . . . . . . . 74
. . . . . . . . . . . 74
. . . . . . . . . . . 75
Inside The
. . . . . . . . . . . 76
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized
dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers
and keep them in a safe place.
Ignition Key
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission
1. Place the shift lever in PARK.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
13
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become temporarily
trapped in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the
key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
WARNING!
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — ACC
2 — LOCK
3 — OFF
4 — ON/RUN
5 — START
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
3. Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key:
1. Press and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
Ignition Release Button
1 — ACC
2 — LOCK
3 — OFF
4 — ON/RUN
5 — START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key into the door lock cylinder with
either side up. To lock the driver’s door, turn the key
rearward. To unlock the driver’s door, turn the key
forward. For external door lock lubrication, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved
approximately a half turn in either direction, and the key
is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
15
To Release the Steering Wheel Lock
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON position, and
the brake pedal is pressed.
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY姞 — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key威 prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to
be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
key to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions
will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sysNOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the problems and loss of security protection.
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
that has never been programmed.
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
be programmed to any other vehicle.
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Replacement Keys
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following steps:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Vehicle Security Alarm is activated it will provide both
audible and visible signals. The horn will sound repeatedly for the three minutes and the headlights, park lamps
and/or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash
for an additional 15 minutes. The engine will not run
until the Vehicle Security Alarm is disarmed
To Set the Alarm
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is
arming. After the Vehicle Security Alarm is set, the
Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to
indicate that the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed.
19
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continuously during vehicle operation, have the Vehicle Security
Alarm checked by an authorized dealer.
To Disarm the System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle
is started with a programmed Sentry Key威. If an unprogrammed Sentry Key威 is used to start a vehicle, the
engine will run for two seconds and then shut down.
After six unsuccessful attempts at starting the engine, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will shut down until the correct
key is used. To exit alarming mode, press the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a
programmed Sentry Key威.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you
remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE
transmitter, the alarm will sound when you pull the door
handle to exit.
NOTE: You may accidentally activate the Vehicle Security Alarm (horn sounds and lights flash) by entering the
vehicle without using the RKE transmitter to unlock the
door(s). The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed with
the RKE transmitter unlock button or by inserting a
programmed Sentry Key威 into the ignition and turning
the key to the ON position.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks
All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the
doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the
last door is closed, or until all doors are closed and either
the ignition is turned to the ON position or a RKE
transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the
interior lights off after eight minutes if the ignition is OFF
and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the
interior lights ON position.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
lights are turned on manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
2
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
1 — Lock
2 — Unlock
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice
to unlock all the doors. When the unlock button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash twice.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
upon the first unlock button press by using the following Vehicle Security Alarm System.
procedure:
5. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
RKE transmitter.
To Lock The Doors
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least 4 sec- Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitonds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold ter to lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors
the UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the
horn will chirp once.
indicate that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
23
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on the RKE transSecurity Alarm System.
mitter.
6. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
2. After holding the LOCK button for four seconds, also
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
press the PANIC button within six seconds. A single
chime will sound to indicate that this feature has Flash Lamps With Lock Programming
changed.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
Horn Chirp Programming
The horn chirp feature is shipped from the assembly
plant activated. If desired, this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
2. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the LOCK button within six seconds. A single
5. Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle
chime will sound to indicate that this feature has
by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
changed.
with the ignition in the OFF position and the key
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
removed.
4. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To cancel the Panic mode, press and release the PANIC
button on the RKE transmitter a second time. Panic mode
will automatically cancel after three minutes, or if the
vehicle is started or exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). During
the Panic Mode, the door locks and RKE systems will
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitfunction normally. Panic mode will not disarm the Veter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
hicle Security Alarm System, on vehicles so equipped.
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the General Information
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Alarm System.
following conditions:
5. If the desired programming was not achieved, or to
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
4. Test the Flash Lamps With Lock feature while outside
of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE
transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the
key removed.
Using The Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF,
press and release the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter once. When the Panic mode is activated, the
interior lights will illuminate, the headlights and parking
lights will flash, and the horn will sound.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal 1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
distance, check for these two conditions:
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
of battery is five years.
elastomer seal during removal.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
How to Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even • Doors closed
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
• Hood closed
tighten the screw until snug. Test the RKE transmitter
• Hazard switch off
operation.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
27
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• The hood is opened
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
order to drive the vehicle.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
29
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by
pushing down the door lock plunger, located on the door
trim panel. Both front doors may be opened from the
inside with the door lock plunger in the down or locked
position.
2
Manual Door Lock Plunger
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive, as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key,
or closing the door, will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
the driver’s door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key.
31
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure.)
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position and back to LOCK position,
a minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position.
(Do not start the engine.)
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock 5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door LOCK
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph switch in the LOCK direction.
(24 km/h).
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped been disabled.
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
following procedure:
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle
has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle
has been driven (shifted out of PARK and the doors
closed).
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
position to the ON position and back to LOCK position,
a minimum of four times; ending in the LOCK position.
(Do not start the engine.)
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door LOCK
switch in the UNLOCK direction.
Auto Unlock Feature Programming
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
The Customer Programming sequence to disable or enbeen changed.
able Auto Unlock:
7. To reactivate the feature, repeat the above steps.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all the doors.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
before the feature could be changed. If necessary, repeat
cancel any chiming that may be confusing during this
the above procedure.
programming procedure.)
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the childprotection door lock system.
33
To use the system, open each rear door, slide the lever up
to engage the locks, and down to disengage the childprotection locks. When the system on a door is engaged,
that door can only be opened by using the outside door
handle, even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
Child Lock Lever
NOTE:
• After setting the child protection door lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger-tip control of all the power windows.
There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON or ACC position, and for ten minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.
Power Window Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
35
Window Lockout Switch
The Window Lockout Switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button a second time.
Auto-Down — Driver’s Side Only
The driver’s window switch has an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Power Window Lockout Switch
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
— if equipped
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
windows down or partially open. This is a normal
wheel
occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs
with the rear windows open, open the front and rear • Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
occupant protection by managing occupant energy
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
during an impact event — if equipped
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature can be used to hold infant
positions
and child restraint systems. For more information on
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen- LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
ger
(LATCH).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
37
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different far away from home or on your own street.
rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
Please pay close attention to the information in this can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
possible.
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
WARNING!
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions, except the front center seating
position (with full bench seat), have combination lap/
shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to
lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver the vehicle or being thrown out.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
39
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
your lap.
adjust the seat.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate
Latch Plate To Buckle
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
41
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and
have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats, the shoulder
belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help
position the belt away from your neck. Push in on the
anchorage release button to release the anchorage, and
then move it up or down to the position that fits you best.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage (Extended Cab)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
43
NOTE: The adjuster has an easy up (EZ Up) feature,
which will allow it to be moved up without engaging the
button.
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position.
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, Children 12 years old and younger should always be
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the properly restrained in the rear seat.
anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
locked in the desired position.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
the entire belt is extracted.
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt from the including those in child restraints.
buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensibelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
tive (emergency) locking mode.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Center Lap Belts
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant ReThe center seat position on the front seat bench has a lap
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretensionbelt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into
ers are single use items. After a collision deploys the
the buckle until you hear a “click.” To lengthen the lap
airbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or
belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the
pretensioner must be replaced immediately.
loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against
the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt
as tightly as is comfortable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威 will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer, or by following these steps:
45
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrylser LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to Seat Belt Extender
signify that you have successfully completed the If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt
programming.
extender. This extender should be used only if the
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the remove the extender and store it.
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
WARNING!
while the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) – Airbags
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
the force if there is a collision.
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove regulations for Advanced Airbags.
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
the airbag covers.
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
Advanced Front Airbags
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Front Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
Advanced Front Airbag Features
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the impact sensors
at the front of the car.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
— if equipped
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
• Steering Wheel and Column
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended.
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the
airbag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
49
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy.
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
the location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from
any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for
the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
51
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat Airbags room to inflate.
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltairbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
door.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer
their arm.
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
Assistance⬙.
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Airbags need
room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC airbags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —
if equipped, as required, depending on severity and type
of impact.
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
of collision.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
53
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the
ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not
on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately six to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation
rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out
of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags
fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about
half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with
your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
55
deploy the SABIC airbags, depending on severity and Front and Side Impact Sensors
type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the In front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining appropriate response to impact events. AdSABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
deployment and provide verification.
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and Enhanced Accident Response System
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your the communication network remains intact, and the
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area event the ORC will determine whether to have the
where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followapplies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about ing functions:
3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
until the ignition key is turned off.
whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
If a Deployment Occurs
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the airbag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrastructions for cleaning.
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have depassenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
airbags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
57
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
• The light remains on after the approximate six to
eight-second interval.
• The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
59
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the 2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
fuse is good.
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param- about the possible causes of crashes and associated
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performoment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high- Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be respeed deceleration data or change in velocity during quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment. officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or associated with universities, and with hospital and insurnearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
ance organizations.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
third party except when:
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data parameters that are recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Vehicle speed
• Engine RPM
• Brake switch status
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data • Pedal position
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
• And other parameters
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
configuration
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Group LLC product.
depending
on
vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and all Canadian provinces, require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children
12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in
a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can become
so great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
61
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
owner’s manual to ensure you have the right seat for
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.
Infants and Small Children
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
•
Seat Anchorage System”.)
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
that does not have a switch to turn the airbag Off. An
airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death
to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. (Refer to “LATCH - Child
Seat Anchorage System”.)
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they need a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg), and who • Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
are older than one year, can ride forward-facing in the
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
against the seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and are
in a rear seat.
older than one year old. These child seats are also held
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
63
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing infant restraint should only be
used in a rear seat of a vehicle that does not have
an airbag off switch. A rearward-facing infant
restraint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant.
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight, if necessary.
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. The manufacturer recommends that you
try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will
• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the
use it before you buy it.
manufacturer’s instructions tell you.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
weight and height limits.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
cause serious personal injury.
not work when you need it.
LATCH - Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
• The Extended Cab first, and Crew Cab second row
Anchors and Tether for CHildren) — if equipped
outside seating positions, have cinching latch plates.
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorThese are designed to keep the lap portion tight
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
65
provides for the installation of the child restraint without Extended Cab
using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing the child
• The Extended Cab front and right rear (if equipped
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
with a rear seat) passenger seating positions have
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCHlower anchorages for LATCH-equipped child recompatible child restraint systems are now available.
straints.
However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
also have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
available for some time. For some older child restraints,
many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage
of all the available attachments provided with your child
restraint in any vehicle.
LATCH Anchors
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Crew Cab
• The Crew Cab second row seat has lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCHcompatible child seats having flexible, webbingmounted lower attachments at all three seating positions. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must
be installed in the outboard positions only. Regardless
of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install
LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats
share a common lower anchorage. If you are installing
LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear
seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but
you must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center
position.
If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible,
you can only install the child restraints using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Refer to “Installing the LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System”.
LATCH Anchors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Anchors
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System — if equipped
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
67
were provided with the child restraint system. The rear
seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are
just visible when you lean into the vehicle to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your
finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat
cushion surfaces. In addition, there are tether strap
anchorages at each LATCH seating position (Refer to
“Child Restraint Tether Anchor”.) Many, but not all,
restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps
on each side, with each having a hook or connector for
attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of
adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-facing toddler
restraints, and some rear-facing infant restraints, will also
be equipped with a tether strap, a hook for attachment to
the tether strap anchorage, and a means of adjusting the
tension of the strap. You will first loosen the adjusters on
the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors
over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat
cover material. Then, attach the tether strap to the
anchorage located on the back of the seat, being careful to
route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchor and the child restraint. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint and route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two posts. Finally,
tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint, so that it should not be necessary to use a
locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate,
pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary. Pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough to allow you to pass through the child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then,
pull the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor.
Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the
excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the
child restraint. For automatic locking retractor seat belts,
refer to ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙. If you have trouble
69
tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint
because, the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt
path opening on the restraint, follow these steps. If the
buckle is webbing-mounted, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt to
shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out. If the belt still can’t be tightened, the buckle is not webbing-mounted, or if pulling
and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may
need to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the latch plate around, and insert
the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t
make the child restraint secure, try a different seating
position or use the locking clip provided with your child
restraint. To complete the child seat installation, refer to
⬙Child Restraint Tether Anchor⬙.
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
The Extended Cab model has one routing strap
located at the bottom of the front passenger
seat side, rear outboard seating position. The
tether anchor itself is located in the center of
vehicle, in between the two seating positions. The front
outboard passenger seating position is also equipped
with a child tether anchorage, located at the base of the
front seatback. When there is a rear seat delete option, the
tether anchorage located on the cab back panel is designed to be used for the front seat center seating
position. The Crew Cab model has three anchorages
located behind each of the rear seating positions (rear left,
rear center, and rear right).
WARNING!
• With a child restraint installed in the rear passenger side locations, use care when adjusting the
front seat(s) rearward, to avoid the front seatback
coming in contact with the belted child directly
behind the seat. The child could be injured.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure the child restraint tether strap is
always routed through the proper anchor strap
inner loop.
Tether Strap at the Front Passenger Seat (Extended Cab)
1. Route the child restraint tether strap up and over the
front passenger seatback, and under the head restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
71
2. Connect the tether strap to the lower anchor located at Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Extended Cab)
the bottom rear of the seat.
1. Route the child restraint tether strap through the
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that it is pulled routing loop, located directly behind the child restraint.
The routing loops are located behind the flip-down door
tight.
on the cab back panel (padded bolster).
Tether Strap
Tether Strap Routing Loop
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Route the tether strap across to the center tether Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat (Crew Cab)
anchorage. The center tether is located behind the slide
1. Route the child restraint tether strap under the head
door in the center of the vehicle, between the two seating
restraint for the outboard seating positions, and then
positions.
through the anchor strap outer loop (webbing material
loop), located directly behind the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap across to the nearest installed
anchor strap, and attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor strap inner metal ring.
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both
anchor straps are pulled tight.
NOTE: Two anchors must be used for any of the three
seating positions.
Tether Strap Routing
3. Remove the slack in the tether strap so that the anchor
strap is pulled tight.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
73
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child restraint to secure
a child restraint top tether strap. See your authorized
dealer for help, if necessary.
Multiple Child Restraints
1 — Inner Anchor Strap Rings
2 — Snap Hook
3 — Tether Strap
4 — Passenger Side Rear Child
Seat
5 — Center Rear Child Seat
6 — Drivers Side Rear Child
Seat
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or SAFETY TIPS
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
Transporting Passengers
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. AREA.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
WARNING!
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
75
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the
Vehicle
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. inoperable.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
77
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
the Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Uconnect™ phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 84
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 䡵 Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 115
䡵 Uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Manual Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . 131
▫ Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 132
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints —
Front Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Six-Way Power Seat Adjuster
(Driver’s Side Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Cargo Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Extended Cab/Crew Cab Rear Seat . . . . . . . 126
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
81
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 138
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . 144
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ To Set a Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ C/T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
䡵 Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer . . . 142
▫ To Put Into a Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ US/M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 152 䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails — If Equipped . . 161
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Rear Crate ’N Go威 Storage — If Equipped . . . . 157
▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped . . . . . 162
▫ Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . . . . . 163
䡵 Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warning-Vehicles
Equipped With A Cap Or Slide-In Campers . . 164
䡵 Tailgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
䡵 Console Features — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Tailgate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Floor Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Two–Position Tailgate/Upper Load Platform . . 166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
83
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
85
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
3
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Folding outside mirrors are hinged, and may be moved
either forward or rearward, to resist damage.
Power Mirror Switch
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When you
are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Mirror Directions
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
87
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
websites:
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
• or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Button
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
(Uconnect™ Phone button) and
buttons
(Voice Command button) that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any Uconnect™
Phone features. Refer to your cellular service provider or • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
the phone manufacturer for details.
prompt.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
Uconnect™ Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
89
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
button and follow the audible prompts for
the
directions. All Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a
button on the radio control head.
press of the
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- • For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your cellular
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instrucphone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
tions for pairing.
given a unique phone name.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone • You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
• Press the
button to begin.
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
connected to your Uconnect™ Phone. The priority
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which cellular
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal IdentiUconnect™ Phone will use the priority three cellular
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the
button to begin.
91
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
want to call.
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
Uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
of certain radios.
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
button to begin.
• Press the
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Call.⬙
• Press the
button to begin.
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomonly in that language. In addition, if equipped and
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automatiinstead of ⬙Bob.⬙
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
Transfer From Cellular Phone
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
entry, if desired.
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook entry that you are adding.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonewebsite for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the • To call a name from downloaded (or Uconnect™)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
main menu.
Name” section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
93
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transstart the vehicle.
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
Phone allows the user to download entries from their
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downphone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button and say “Phonebook Download.” The system
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availprompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonefor use.
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu- Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
lar phone is accessible.
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
• Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded. these entries from your phone.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
NOTE:
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
and you may see a message on the phone display that
deleted or edited.
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
button to begin.
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to • Press the
the Uconnect™ Phone, and then send the address
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
95
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
number to a name entry that already exists in the
button while the
from the list, press the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
⬙Delete.⬙
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
• Press the
button to begin.
language is deleted.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
deleted or edited.
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
List All Names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook
• Press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
deleted.
button during the playing of the desired name, and
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
say ⬙Call.⬙
is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
deleted or edited.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
97
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
cellular phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Currently in Progress
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
button to accept the call. To reject the
call. Press the
button until you hear a
call, press and hold the
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the
button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button
while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call,
as described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.
press the
button until you hear a single beep,
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
99
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the cellular phone.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
OFF.
Uconnect™ Phone.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• Press the
button to begin.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Press the
button to begin.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency numvoice commands will be in that language.
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
Mexico.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and usable across all languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
101
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country Towing Assistance
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and If you need towing assistance:
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not • Press the
button to begin.
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
button and
some systems. To do this, press the
NOTE:
say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14for the cellular phone directly.
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
WARNING!
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
Towing Assistance references.
Uconnect™ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect™
some systems. To do this, press the
button and
Phone.
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
Voice Mail Calling
button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working press the
a
number,
or
sequence
of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
with Automated Systems.⬙
also to be used for navigating through an automated
Working with Automated Systems
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
This method is used in instances where one generally has number on a pager.
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
navigating through an automated telephone system.
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
vices require immediate response selection. In some say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
103
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
tones over the phone.
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone • Press the
button to begin.
network configurations. This is normal.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The Uconnect™ Phone will
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
use of this feature.
will be given the choice to change it.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,⬙ you
button and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
• Press the
button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular phone to the • When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
button
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the
• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
button and
phone being announced, press the
Uconnect™ Phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two secelectronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
tions for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a
with one electronic device at a time.
paired phone.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 Select Another Cellular Phone
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired cellular This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
• Press the
button to begin.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
button to begin.
• Press the
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the
button at any time while
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Cellular Phones
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
training mode, follow one of the two following proce• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the dures:
prompts.
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
• You can also press the
button at any time while radio mode):
the list is being played, and then choose the phone you • Press and hold the
button for five seconds until
wish to delete.
the session begins, or,
• Press the
button to begin.
• Press the
button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice
Training⬙ command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Uconnect™ Phone. For best results, the Voice Training
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
you.
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
blower fan switched off.
during a Voice Command period.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
• Performance is maximized under:
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
To restore the Voice Command system to factory default
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
• low road noise,
Voice Command
• smooth road surface,
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
• fully closed windows,
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• dry weather condition.
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
Phone Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Audio quality is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero).
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported.
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
113
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Primary
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
115
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
button, you
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to command.
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
seconds, the system will present you with a list of listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
button, listen a normal speaking volume.
options, press the Voice Command
for the beep, and say your command.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winbutton while the dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
Pressing the Voice Command
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system set to low.
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
change commands. This will become helpful once you commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
start to learn the options.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, Command
button and say “Help” or “Main
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported • “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
Changing the Volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
button.
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
this mode, you may say the following commands:
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Main Menu
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
menu.
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
mands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
119
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
System Setup
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Language German”
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Language Dutch”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Language Italian”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Language English”
— During the playback you may press the Voice
• “Language French”
button to stop playing memos. You
Command
• “Language Spanish”
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Tutorial”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Voice Training”
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice SEATS
button first and wait for the beep Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
Command
of the vehicle. Proper use of the seats is needed for safe
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
operation of the vehicle.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogWARNING!
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriSetup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
ously injured or killed.
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
and will improve recognition.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
using a seat belt properly.
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Adjustment
The adjusting lever is at the front of the seat, near the
floor. Lift the lever and move the seat to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat into position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
121
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Front Seats Manual Seat Recliners
The front seats are equipped with recliners. The reclining
mechanism is operated by a lever located on the right
side of the passenger’s seat and the left side of the
driver’s seat. To recline, lean forward slightly before
lifting the lever, then push back to the desired position
and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to
Adjusting Lever
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
return the seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure the seatback is locked.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
The manual lumbar support rotary control adjustment is
located on the left side of the driver’s seat. Rotate the
knob to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar
support.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
To lower the head restraint, press the release button
located at the base of the head restraint and push down
on the head restraint.
3
Lumbar Adjustment
Adjustable Head Restraints — Front Seating
Positions
Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a rear impact. Pull up or push down on the restraints
so that the upper edge is as high as practical, at least to
the level of the ears.
Adjustable Head Restraints
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should always be checked prior to operating the
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
vehicle is in PARK.
Six-Way Power Seat Adjuster (Driver’s Side Only)
The power seat controls are located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat cushion. Three switches control the
seat movement. The four-way switch in the center can be
moved forward, backward, up, or down to adjust for the
most comfortable position.
Up, Down, Forward and Rearward
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The seat angle can also be adjusted by using the two
toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
125
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Tilt Adjustment
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the High-level heating is selected, the system will
Extended Cab/Crew Cab Rear Seat
More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear automatically switch to Low-level heating after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time,
seat cushion.
the number of indicators illuminated changes from two
The Crew Cab Rear Seat is a 60/40 split cushion and full
to one, indicating the change. Operation on the Low-level
back. Either cushion can be raised, independently.
setting also turns Off automatically after approximately
Heated Seats — If Equipped
30 minutes.
The heated seat switches are located on the center of the
WARNING!
instrument panel.
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
127
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. First pull the hood release lever located under the left
side of the instrument panel.
3
CAUTION!
Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the
heating element and/or degrade the material of the
seat.
Hood Release Lever Location
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Then push the safety latch lever up while lifting the
grille with your hand. It is located at the bottom center of
the grille.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center front
edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Secondary Latch Location
Lift the hood, and the gas filled props will hold it open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
129
LIGHTS
Interior Lights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
instrument panel next to the steering wheel.
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the interior
lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way
down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to
go out. This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it
allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of
time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
Headlight Switch Location
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re- NOTE: Club Cab威/Quad Cab威 models may have an
quired during the day. If the dimmer control is not in this optional switched dome lamp that is operated by pressposition, the audio display may be difficult to read if the ing the lens.
headlights are on during the daytime.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
15 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for
15 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Dimmer Control
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
131
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlight on for
60 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is
turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. The headlights will remain
on for 60 seconds. Headlight delay can be cancelled by
either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
turning the ignition ON.
Headlights, Parking Lights And Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
Headlight Switch
lights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
all turned on. The headlights will turn on when the
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
switch is rotated to the second position.
than glass headlights.
3
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
lights are left on, after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- Fog Lights — If Equipped
The Fog Lights are turned on by placing the
lowed by rinsing.
headlight rotary control in the parking light or
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
headlight position and pushing on the headlight
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
rotary control. The fog lights will operate only when the
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
parking lights are on, or when the vehicle headlights are
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the on low beam. An indicator light located in the instrument
engine is started, the transmission is out of the PARK cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog
position and the parking brake is released. This provides lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second
a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until the ignition is time, also when the headlight switch is rotated to the off
turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than normal position, or the high beam is selected.
intensity. If the parking brake is applied or the transmission is in the PARK position, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Light — If Equipped
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on cargo
button. The cargo lights will also turn on for 30 seconds
when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry
feature.
133
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Cargo Light Switch
Signaling Turns
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Pull the multifunction lever fully toward the steering
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam.
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• If a turn signal has been left on for a minimum of
1 mile (1.6 km), a continuous chime will sound.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights
until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the multifunction
lever to select the desired wiper speed.
3
Wiper/Washer Operation
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every two seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
knob is pushed, for a period greater than one second
while in the off position, the wiper will wipe approximately three wipes after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that exceeds
the temperature range of your climate. This rating inforNOTE: If the front wiper is operating when the ignition mation can be found on most washer fluid containers.
is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the
WARNING!
⬙Park⬙ position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wipers
will resume operation.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
Windshield Washers
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
of the multifunction lever and hold while spray is the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the windshield with the defroster before and during
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds windshield washer use.
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the turn signal lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Push the lever away from the steering wheel to lock the
column firmly in place.
3
Tilt Steering Column Lever
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The control buttons for the Electronic Speed Control are
located on the steering wheel. When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation
at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — Resume
2 — Cancel
3 — Decel
4 — Set
5 — On/Off
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates to
indicate that the system is on.
139
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control ON when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the
Electronic Speed Control to cause it to go faster than
you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not
using it.
To Set a Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, or pressing
the CANCEL button will deactivate the speed control
without erasing the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases
the memory.
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control System is ON, the
speed can be increased by pressing and holding the
RESUME/ACCEL button. When the button is released, a
new set speed will be established.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed To Accelerate for Passing
increase of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
tapped, speed increases so that tapping the button three pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
times will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h).
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000 ft
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed (610 m), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded (especially
decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). Each time the button is when towing) the vehicle may slow below the SET speed.
tapped, speed will decrease. For example, tapping the If the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph (40 km/h), the
button three times will decrease the speed by 3 mph Electronic Speed Control will automatically disengage. If
this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
(4.8 km/h).
pedal to maintain the desired speed.
To decrease the speed while the Electronic Speed Control
is on, press and hold the DECEL button. Release the Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may
button when the desired speed is reached, and the new exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to imspeed will be set.
prove vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
OVERDRIVE by pressing the TOW/HAUL button located at the end of the shift lever.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
141
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
3
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console has the following features:
Overhead Console
• Courtesy Lights
• Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
• Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer — If
Equipped
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Reading Lights
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
Near the front of the console are two courtesy/reading This feature allows you to choose between a compass/
temperature display and one of four trip conditions being
lights.
monitored.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the US/M Button
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when Use the US/M button to change the display from U.S. to
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless metric measurement units.
Entry (RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after approximately 10 minutes.
US/M Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RESET Button
Use the RESET button to reset the following displays:
• Average Fuel Economy
143
STEP Button
Use the STEP button to choose, or cycle through, the four
trip conditions.
• Trip Odometer
3
• Elapsed time.
STEP Button
RESET Button
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Displays the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Average fuel economy is a running average of the
amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has
traveled. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will
momentarily blank, the history will be erased, and the
AVERAGE WILL CONTINUE FROM WHERE IT WAS
BEFORE THE RESET. The reset value is based on a
minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled
from the previous drive cycle. The display may take
several miles/kilometers for this value to change, depending upon driving habits.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
NOTE: The DTE is not resettable.
When Distance To Empty = LOW FUEL, the fuel gauge
pointer will initially be on the red “E” marker. At this
point (fuel gauge pointer on the red “E” marker), there is
reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approximately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions
in areas where there aren’t many gas stations.
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to zero
until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
145
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
NOTE:
The maximum
6000 miles (9656 km).
value
is
approximately
3
Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer to
change to zero. Then the trip odometer must be reset in
order to update the trip odometer miles.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset. Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause
the display to change to zero.
C/T Button
The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven
C/T Button
Use the C/T (Compass/Temperature) button to select a several minutes before the updated temperature is disreadout of the outside temperature and one of eight played. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed
compass headings that indicate the direction in which the temperature, therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
vehicle is facing.
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within two seconds
while in any of the three resettable displays (AVG ECO,
ODO, ET), the GLOBAL RESET will reset all three
displays.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
Compass/Temperature Display
After completing one 360 degree turn with the vehicle
traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32°
F (0° C), the road surface may be icy, particularly in
woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Overhead Console. This is where the compass sensor
is located.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manually calibrating the compass.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
147
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
To Put Into a Calibration Mode
Turn the ignition ON and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL symbol is displayed, complete one 360 degree turn in an area
free from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL
symbol will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
Compass Variance Map
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
according to the Compass Variance Map.
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last variance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
RESET button to resume normal operation.
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located under
the hood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature; therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) or during stop-and-go driving.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off of your vehicle’s battery.
HomeLink Buttons
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Theft
console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines desig- Alarm is active.
nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety
features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the
Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
149
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) illuminates
the HomeLink威 symbol (a house with an arrow inside it)
along with 1, 2 or 3 indicators under it, when a
HomeLink威 button is pressed.
Pay attention to the indicator(s), as they will flash at
different rates, or remain solid during training.
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds. Release the buttons when the indicators start
to flash.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
handheld transmitter of the device being copied to
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage If the signal is too weak to train, replace the battery in the
while training.
handheld transmitter.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
HomeLink威 display in view.
the indicator(s) blink rapidly for two seconds and then
For optimal training, point the battery end of the handremains constant, continue with the next section: “Proheld transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
gramming A Rolling Code System”.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
HomeLink威button and the handheld transmitter button
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
until the indicator(s) change from a slow to a rapid flash
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
rate.
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld trans- to the heading, “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
mitter buttons.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
garage door may open and close while you train.
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door).
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you are have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator(s) will change from a slow flash to a rapid flash
when trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under, “Programming
HomeLink威,” earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
door or gate motor.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
HomeLink,” Step 3, with the following:
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button, used at any time.
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active.
follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
are some of the most common solutions:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the indicator(s) starts to flash. Do not • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
release the button.
• Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for Rolling Code.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink威, Step #2, and follow all remaining
• Did you unplug the device for training and remember
steps.
to plug it back in?
Security
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
in your vehicle.
www.HomeLink.com, for information or assistance.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicators begin to flash. Note that
all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
This vehicle has two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
outlets that can provide power for accessories designed
for use with standard power outlet adapters. The power
outlets are located in the instrument panel (below the
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
temperature control setting knob) and inside the full-size
2. This device must accept any interference that may be center console.
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Instrument Panel Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used,
it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically
when ready for use. To preserve the heating element, do
not hold the lighter in the heating position.
NOTE:
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
155
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in, draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Use these only intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CUPHOLDERS
If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console,
there are three cupholders located on the console.
Front Cup Holders — Crew Cab
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
A two-cavity cupholder is available on all Crew Cabs,
with rear seats mounted on the floor.
3
Open Crate
Rear Cup Holders — Crew Cab
1 — Crate Handles
2 — Crate End Flaps
3 — Release Lever
REAR CRATE ’N GO姞 STORAGE — IF EQUIPPED
The rear Crate ’n Go威 storage, located under the rear seat To open the crates, lift upward on the crate handles and
lower cushion, consists of two removable, collapsible engage the crate end flaps.
storage crates.
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the crate, press on the release lever, located on To collapse the crate, push the crate end flaps inward to
the ends of the base, and lift up on the crate.
disengage. Push the sides inward and snap into place.
To install the crate into the base, insert the crate into the
inboard slot and push down on the outboard side of the
crate, then snap into place.
WARNING!
Do not sit or stand on this crate. It may collapse
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Do not lift up on the “End Flaps” to open the crate,
damage to the “End Flaps” may occur.
NOTE: The maximum loading capacity for the small
crate is 30 lbs (13.6 kg) and 50 lbs (22.6 kg) for the large
crate.
Insert Crate
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
159
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
CONSOLE FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Retainer hooks, which will hold plastic grocery bag
Floor Console Features
handles, are built into the back panel of the cab.
The Floor Console between the driver’s and front passenger’s seat has the following features:
• Miscellaneous storage compartments.
• Three cupholders (two removable).
• iPod/Phone storage bin.
• 12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment.
• Side open armrest lid.
• Tissue holder and two pen holders.
Grocery Bag Retainers
• Coin slots (located under the instrument panel center
stack).
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Compartments
Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cupholders are both removable and dishwasher safe (upper rack
of dishwasher only) for cleaning purposes. Various storage compartments provide versatile and useful storage.
A coin holder is also provided inside the driver side
storage bin.
Power Outlet and Portable Phone Storage
The console is equipped with a power outlet and an
iPod/phone storage bin. The phone storage bin can be
used when easy access to the phone is needed. Also, the
power outlet inside the console compartment can be used
to charge the phone while it is being stored in the bin. The
power outlet may be used for any portable item with a
standard 12 Volt power plug.
Side Open Armrest Lid
Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens
the console armrest lid. The armrest lid will remain open
until the armrest lid is closed manually, by pressing the
lid back into place. Two pen holders are provided on the
inside of the armrest lid. A tissue holder is also provided
on the inside of the armrest lid, which holds a pocket-size
soft pack of tissue.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails — If Equipped
CAUTION!
3
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
320 lbs (145 kg) and the angle of the load on each
cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal,
or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are four adjustable cleats that can be used to assist
in securing cargo. Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of the detent’s, along either rail, in
order to keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the
detent and tighten the nut.
1 — Utility Rail Cleat
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Detent
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end REAR WINDOW FEATURES
cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
The rear window defroster button is located on the
rail.
right-side of the Air Conditioning and Heater
Control, below the A/C (snowflake) button. Press this
button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five
minutes of operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
Utility Rail End Cap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
163
Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
3
Sliding Rear Window Latch
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To mount a camper unit with an overhang, the tailgate
can be removed. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the
Camper Applications
support cables from the retainer pins. Raise the right side
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
of the tailgate until the lower right side pivot clears the
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
hanger bracket. Then slide the tailgate to the right to
refer to the Consumer Information Truck-Camper Loadremove.
ing document, located in your Owner’s Manual packet or
available from your authorized dealer. For safety reasons, Carbon Monoxide Warning-Vehicles Equipped
With A Cap or Slide-In Campers
follow all instructions on this important document.
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
General Information
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhangmodifications and special equipment, such as a camper
ing camper compartment and be free of leaks.
unit, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc., supplied by
manufacturers other than Chrysler LLC. For warranty
coverage and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
165
TAILGATE
Tailgate Removal
To simplify mounting a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed quickly. Follow these steps:
1. Open the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
3
2. Unclip and remove the cables from the box while
maintaining a 45 degree angle.
Tailgate Cable
3. Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side
by pulling upward and rearward at the same time.
4. Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making
sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained.
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To reinstall the tailgate, do the following:
1. Slide the tailgate onto the driver’s side pivot.
2. Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert it into
the passenger side pivot.
3. Clip the cables to the box.
Two–Position Tailgate/Upper Load Platform
Your tailgate can be opened to the full-open or the
partial-open position. The partial-open position is for
loading objects longer than the length of the bed (sheets
of plywood, etc.) by creating an upper load platform:
Installing Lumber
1 — Bulkhead Divider Slot
2 — Wheel Housing Indentions
1. Place lumber across the box in the indentations pro2. Secure the tailgate in the partially-open position:
vided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead
dividers, to form the floor. There are indents in the sheet 3. Open the tailgate slightly.
metal (or bed liner if equipped) on the inner side of the
box in front (Club Cab威 only) and behind both wheel
housings.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
4. Snap the tailgate support cable between the cable 2. Remove both cables from between the cable guides
guide and the tailgate bumper. Do this on both sides of and the tailgate bumpers, and lower the tailgate.
the tailgate.
CAUTION!
Tailgate Guide
To return the tailgate to the full-open position:
1. Lift up on the tailgate.
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with cargo. Vehicle speeds may need to be
reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in
vehicle damage.
• Ensure the load is securely tied down and is
properly identified according to local laws if it
extends beyond the tail lights.
• Loading should not exceed 400 lbs (181 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse and
partially open tailgate or vehicle damage may
result.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 188
䡵 Instrument Cluster
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 196
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 174
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
䡵 Media Center 230 (REQ) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio And 6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 198
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . 201
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Media Center 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
AM/FM Stereo Radio And CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ phone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio . . . . . . 204
▫ Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio . . 206
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES) — AM/FM Stereo
Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack). . . . . . . 208
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 208
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 216
䡵 Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack)
And Sirius Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 217
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 227
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 228
䡵 Sound Box Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —
If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU/RBZ
Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
171
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 230
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™
Multimedia (Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Operating Instructions —
Video Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 237
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Air Conditioning And Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Operation Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Headlight Switch
— Air Outlets
— Demister Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Airbags
6 — Glove Compartment
7 — Radio
8 — Climate Controls
9 — Power Outlet
10 — Heated Seat Switches*
11 — Transfer Case Switch*
12 — Speed Control Switches
13 — Hood Release
14 — Parking Brake Release
* If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
173
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The
gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or
when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running as you would not be able to react to the
temperature gauge if the engine overheats.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
When a turn signal is activated, a right-pointing or
left-pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the
direction of the turn. These indicators also indicate
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal,
check for a defective bulb. If either indicator fails to light
up when the lever is moved, check for a defective fuse or
turn signal LED. A single chime is activated when the
left/right turn signal is left on, with the vehicle speed
greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for more than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
4. Low Fuel Warning Light
The low fuel warning light will illuminate when the
fuel gauge reads 1/8 of a tank or less. There is a
pointer on the side of this symbol that indicates the
side that your fuel filler door is located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
175
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera5. High Beam Indicator
The high beam indicator will illuminate if the ture gauge to pass H (Hot), the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the
headlights are on high beam.
engine is allowed to cool.
6. Seat Belt Reminder Light
The seat belt reminder light will illuminate for
CAUTION!
several seconds after the ignition is turned ON as
a reminder to “buckle up.” This light will remain Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled. If this light damage your vehicle. If the temperature light is on,
flashes, it indicates a fault in the seat belt system. Have safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
the system checked by an authorized dealer. Refer to in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start- the light turns off. If the light remains on, turn the
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
engine off immediately, and call for service.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H (Hot), this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed.
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
10. Vehicle Security Light
The vehicle security light will flash rapidly for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security alarm is arming. The light will flash at
a slower speed continuously after the alarm is
set. The security light will also come on for about three
seconds when the ignition is first turned ON.
9. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the 11. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
(ABS). The light will illuminate when the ignias a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
tion switch is turned to the ON position and
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not illuminate when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
12. Oil Pressure Warning Light
The Oil Pressure Warning Light illuminates when
the engine oil pressure has become too low. For a
bulb check, this light will come on momentarily when the
ignition is turned ON. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as
possible. Immediate service should be obtained.
177
13. Tachometer
The tachometer gauge measures engine revolutions-perminute (RPM x 1000).
14. Shift Lever Indicator
The electronic shift lever indicator is self-contained
within the instrument cluster. It displays the position of
the automatic transmission shift lever, and the relation of
each position to all other positions. The display will place
a box around the selected transmission range (PRND21).
If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 (no
boxes), have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
15. Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press and release
the trip odometer button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the trip odometer then
push and hold the button until the display resets (approximately two seconds).
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Odometer Messages
gASCAP
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
messages will display in the odometer:
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
LoW tirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure problem continues, the message will appear the next time
noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault the vehicle is started.
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required LoW tirE
LoW WASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
On vehicles equipped with a Overhead Console with
Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer, some vehicle messages may display in the Overhead Console
with Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer when
the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to Overhead Console with Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three
cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odometer display area. For further information on fuses and fuse
locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CHAngE OIL Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “CHAngE OIL” message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
179
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
16. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each been driven.
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
following procedure:
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
start the engine).
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
17. Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
The fog light indicator illuminates when the fog
lights are on.
18. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature, that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL, until the light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
In some circumstances a Transmission Temperature
Warning Light, under continued operation, could
cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) – If Equipped
The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) light
informs you of a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. If the light remains
lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine
is running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON
and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
181
20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
sary.
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
183
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon
21. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
as possible.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) that
CAUTION!
monitors the emissions and engine control system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and damage to the engine control system. It also could
remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing, the light flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and
required.
remain on until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not
come on during starting, have the condition investigated
promptly.
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
should be checked monthly, when cold and
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
185
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23. Airbag Warning Light
The airbag warning light will illuminate and
remain lit for six to eight seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON. If the light does not
illuminate when the ignition is first turned ON,
or the light stays on or comes on while driving, have the
airbag system checked by an authorized dealer. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
seconds. If the light stays on or illuminates during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
26. Cruise Indicator
The cruise indicator illuminates when the electronic
speed control system is turned on.
27. Cargo Lamp
The Cargo Lamp indicator will illuminate
when the Cargo Lamp is activated by pressing
24. 4WD Indicator
the CARGO button, located on the headlight
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
switch.
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
to receive torque from the engine simulta- 28. TOW/HAUL
neously.
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/
25. SVC (Service) 4WD Indicator
HAUL button has been selected.
The SVC 4WD illuminates when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and will stay on for two
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
29. 4WD LOW Indicator
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
30. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer
display. Holding the button in, resets the trip odometer
reading.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model), whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
187
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, timekeeping is
accurately maintained.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio, the time button
alternates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio, only one
of the two, time or frequency, is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO control knob.
3. After the hours are adjusted, push the TUNE/AUDIO
control knob to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE/AUDIO
control knob.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait approximately
five seconds.
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 230 (REQ) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
side of the radio faceplate.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
REQ Radio
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
189
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Clock Setting Procedure
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature 1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
SCROLL control knob.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ RW/FF
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
will begin to blink.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
TUNE Control
knob to save the time change.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
step 2.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
INFO Button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
mid-range tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
191
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ format types:
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
16-Digit Character
Program Type
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Display
No program type or unPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
None
defined
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Classical
Classicl
the front and rear speakers.
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
College
College
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
Country
Country
MUSIC TYPE Button
Foreign Language
Language
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Information
Inform
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character
Display
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
193
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
NOTE:
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current • The available selections for each of the above entries
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
varies depending upon the disc.
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between • These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set Subtitle Language — If Equipped
defaults according to customer preference.
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
Menu Language — If Equipped
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
to select the number and then push to select.
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
195
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
Off or On.
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
Audio DRC — If Equipped
customer-preferred settings.
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under AM and FM Buttons
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
AutoPlay — If Equipped
and press and release that button. If a button is not
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butbypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
stored into pushbutton memory.
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
CAUTION!
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
197
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
position to operate the radio.
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
reading the disc.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CAUTION!
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only. of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
player mechanism.
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
CD currently playing.
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
TIME Button (CD MODE)
following restrictions.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
RW/FF (CD MODE)
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
works in a similar manner.
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
199
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
character extension)
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
character extension)
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
WMA
Specification
WMA
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
48, 64, 96, 128,
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
supported by the radios.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
supported.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
201
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilINFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
For Uconnect™ “Voice Command,” refer to “Uconnect™
Phone” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Press the TIME button to change the display from
Equipped)
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
display for five seconds.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
No function.
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
203
DTS™
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital TheSystem (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™ ater Systems, Inc.
Guide.”
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430 (RER/REN/RBZ) —
Dolby威
AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories. IF EQUIPPED
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
Dolby威 Laboratories.
of the unit’s faceplate.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol- The REN, RER and RBZ radios contain a CD/DVD
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec- player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD).
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm)
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is touch screen allows for easy menu selection.
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse (GPS)-based Navigation system.
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia REN, RER or RBZ
user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Command
System — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone — If
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
Clock Setting Procedure — RBZ Radio
downward is displayed.
To Manually Set the Clock
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
1. Turn on the radio.
the word “Save” is displayed.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed, the clock Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
setting menu will appear on the screen.
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
205
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The Changing the Time Zone
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
1. Turn on the radio.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
played to change the current setting.
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
Show Time if Radio is Off
the screen.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed 4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
as follows to change the current setting:
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
1. Turn on the radio.
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is disUconnect威 gps — RER Only
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downthe time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
ward is displayed.
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s 5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
daylight savings information is set.
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
downward is displayed.
1. Turn on the radio.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
the word “Save” is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure — RER/REN Radio
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
207
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in Changing the Time Zone
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
1. Turn on the radio.
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
played to change the current setting.
Show Time if Radio is Off
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
When selected, this feature will display the time of day clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
as follows to change the current setting:
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
1. Turn on the radio.
the screen.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed, the
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
4. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
6. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES) — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
209
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
will remain tuned to the new station until you make SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
another selection. Holding either button will bypass knob to save time change.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
RW/FF
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
and radio frequency.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
Clock Setting Procedure
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
TUNE Control
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SCROLL control knob.
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will begin to blink.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Memory
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
treble tones.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
211
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Buttons 1 - 6
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
CAUTION!
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
can cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
213
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
CD and MP3 modes.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
TIME Button
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or Play.
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
button works in a similar manner.
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
AM/FM Button
file recording media and formats are limited. When
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
display.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
215
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
MPEG-2 Audio
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
Layer 3
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
VBR bit rate.
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
to load than non-multisession discs
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
increase with more files and folders
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a OFF).
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEDIA CENTER 130 (RES/RSC) — AM/FM
STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX
JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO
217
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
side of the radio faceplate.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES/RSC Radio
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea- available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
tures If Your Vehicle”.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
Uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
219
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ INFO Button
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
will begin to blink.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. AM or FM frequencies.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
procedure, starting at Step 2.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
16-Digit Character
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No
program
type
or
unand FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
None
defined
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
the front and rear speakers.
Classical
Classicl
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
16-Digit Character
Display
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Program Type
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
221
16-Digit Character
Display
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
the following items:
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
be stored into pushbutton memory.
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
to save time change.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
AM/FM Button
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
button number will display.
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to Buttons 1 - 6
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
223
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
position to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
(Continued)
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, RW/FF
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on works in a similar manner.
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
225
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
dom Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
file recording media and formats are limited. When
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricof files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
tions.
display the file name and folder name and will assign a
Supported Media (Disc Types)
number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threenot play the file.
character extension)
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threean MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). VBR bit rates.
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
MPEG
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Specification Frequency (kHz)
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times.
MPEG-1 Audio
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
Layer
3
112,
96, 80, 64,
Supported MP3 File Formats
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten160, 128, 144,
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
MPEG-2 Audio
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
Layer 3
16, 8
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
227
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
increase with more files and folders
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
supported.
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
time to start playing the MP3 files.
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
by the following:
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than playable files).
CD-R media
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed down.
time⬙ priority mode.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
more and the radio will display song titles for each file. time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an Features If Your Vehicle”.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
audio system to amplify the source and play through the (Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
vehicle speakers.
Refer to “Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio)”.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SOUND BOX OPERATION
The Sound Box includes one subwoofer, two tweeters
and lights that pulsate with the music.
The lights can be: turned off, on constantly, or pulse with
the beat of the music. To control the lights, select one of
the following three positions:
Switch Position
1
2
3
Sound Box
229
Light Operation
Pulse (right/passenger
side) position – In this
position the sound is active and the lights will
pulse with the music.
Pulse off/light off (center)
position – In this position
the sound is active but
the lights will be turned
off.
Constant (left/driver side)
position – In this position
the sound is active and
the lights will remain on
constantly.
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect™ Multimedia (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU/RBZ
RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
231
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
the radio to exit this screen.
mode.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER/RBZ Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio Satellite Antenna
faceplate.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lugWhile in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
faceplate.
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and Reception Quality
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
vehicle will display.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
form of short audio mutes.
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
cause intermittent reception.
button a second time.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
cause signal blockage.
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaOperating Instructions — Uconnect™ Multimedia tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail(Satellite) Mode
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
position to operate the radio.
normal display).
SEEK Buttons
INFO Button — REU Radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode
for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
233
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
Sirius subscription.
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions — Uconnect™ Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
235
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
button does not function for all other radios.
too high.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
precautions:
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
237
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Air Conditioning and Heater
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating, ventilation and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary
knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
Air Conditioning and Heater Control
interior conditions.
Air Conditioning and Heater Operation
To turn on the air conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the SNOWFLAKE button located at the
right of the control panel. Conditioned air will be directed through the outlets selected by the mode control.
4
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
A light at the top of the SNOWFLAKE button shows that Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level )
Select the recirculation modes when
the air conditioning is on. Press the button a second time
the outside air contains dust, odors,
to turn the air conditioning off.
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
desired. This feature allows for recirwhen the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
culation of interior air only. Air flows
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
either through the panel outlets or
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
both the panel and floor outlets toThe Mode Control (at the right of the gether, depending on which recirculation mode is
control panel) can be set in any of the selected.
following positions:
Panel (Fresh Air Modes)
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
instrument panel and at the floor.
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots.
Mode Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Floor
239
Blower Control
Outside air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
NOTE: The air conditioner compressor operates in both
Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if the
A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies the
air to help dry the windshield.
The rotary knob on the left of the
control panel is the Blower Control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center of the
control panel controls the temperature
of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the extreme
right (red region) of the rotation.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also provide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix, Defrost, or Bi-Level modes are
in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, open the windows and turn the
blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position, turn
the mode control to the panel fresh position, press the
Side window demisters direct airflow specifically to the
SNOWFLAKE button to turn on the air conditioning, and
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
drive with the windows open for the first few minutes.
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
Once the hot air has been expelled, close the windows
and turn the mode selector to the Recirculation Panel
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode or Recirculation Mode Bi-level position. When a
comfortable condition has been reached, choose a mode
position and adjust the temperature control knob and
blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort. For high
humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the
Recirculation mode to maintain comfort.
241
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside Contaminates on the inside of windows can increase the
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool rate of window fogging.
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
Summer Operation
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the SNOWAir conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
FLAKE button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature
quality antifreeze coolant during summer, to provide
control, air direction and blower speed to maintain
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
comfort.
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50%
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to concentration of engine coolant to distilled water is
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode recommended. Refer to “Cooling System” under “Mainposition on the control. Adjust the temperature control tenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
and blower speed to maintain comfort. High blower
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy
traffic, in hot weather, especially when towing a trailer,
additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower
gear and set the air conditioner to recirculation mode.
Operating the air conditioner in recirculation mode provides the maximum performance from your air conditioning. When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL and press the accelerator
slightly for fast idle operation.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions. This will help prevent snow going into the ducts.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
243
Operation Tips Chart
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 253
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or –29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 251
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
䡵 Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 258
▫ NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Shifting Procedure – NV233/243 Transfer
Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Limited-Slip Rear Axle Differential —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Rear-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . 270
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 279
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 285
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
247
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 䡵 Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ E85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 293
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Vehicles (E85) And Gasoline Vehicles . .
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 300
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 303
. . . . 303
. . . . 304
. . . . 304
. . . . 305
. . . . 306
. . . . 306
. . . . 306
. . . . 306
. . . . 307
. . . . 307
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 308
䡵 Vehicle Loading
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Curb Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
䡵 Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 317
STARTING AND OPERATING
249
STARTING PROCEDURES
Tip Start Feature
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
WARNING!
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position,
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
cause serious injury or death.
procedure.
Normal Starting
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or
NOTE: Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
driving range.
pedal.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
pressed to shift out of PARK.
within 10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait
5 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (below –20°F or –29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel, in case the engine is flooded.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
251
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
have enough power to continue running when the key is standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel- grounded, three-wire extension cord.
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the The engine block heater cord is located at the right front
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running of the engine compartment for all engine applications.
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should be
repeated.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key
can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition
is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever
is locked in PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
253
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Automatic Transmission
Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift
The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates lever into the PARK position.
the transmission gear selected. The shift lever is mounted
WARNING!
on the right side of the steering column. To drive, move
the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the desired
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
drive position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
shifting into REVERSE, SECOND, FIRST or PARK, or
brake fully, when parked, to guard against vehicle
when shifting out of PARK.
movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward
or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle
and hit someone or something. Only shift into
gear when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
DRIVE
This range is for most city and highway driving.
2 (Second)
This range is for driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on
mountain roads where more precise speed control is
desirable, use second gear. Use it also when climbing
long grades, and for engine braking when descending
moderately steep grades. To prevent excessive engine
speed, do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) in this range.
1 (First)
REVERSE
This range is for driving up very steep hills and for
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only engine braking at low speeds, 25 mph (40 km/h) or less,
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
when going down hill, use first gear. To prevent excessive
engine speed do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this
NEUTRAL
This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro- range.
longed periods with engine running. Engine may be Overdrive Operation
started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an
leave the vehicle.
electronically-controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped)
STARTING AND OPERATING
gear (Overdrive). The transmission will automatically
shift from Drive to Overdrive, if the following conditions
are present:
• the shift lever is in DRIVE;
255
automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature. Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer to “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section.
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem• If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
perature;
transmission will automatically select the most desir• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph
able gear for operation at this temperature. If the
(48 km/h);
transmission temperature becomes hot enough, the
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illu• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
minate and the transmission may downshift out of
• transmission has reached normal operating
Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
temperature.
cool down, the transmission will resume normal
operation.
NOTE:
• If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to
the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
5
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in TOW/HAUL mode, top gear is disabled and
some shift patterns are modified. On vehicles with fivespeed transmissions, shifts into Overdrive (fourth gear)
are allowed during steady cruise (for improved fuel
economy), and automatic closed-throttle downshifts to
third gear (for improved braking) will occur during
steady braking.
TOW/HAUL Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
257
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the NOTE:
instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been • The torque converter clutch will not engage until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usuactivated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
ally after 1-3 miles [1.6 - 4.8 km] of driving). Because
normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
the switch must be pressed each time the engine is
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmisstarted.
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
Torque Converter Clutch
normal. Pressing the TOW/HAUL switch, when the
A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate
in all automatic transmissions. A clutch, within the
that the transmission is able to shift into, and out of
torque converter, engages automatically at a calibrated
Overdrive.
speed at light throttle. It engages at higher speeds under
heavier acceleration. This may result in a slightly differ- • If the vehicle has not been driven in several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transent feeling or response during normal operation in high
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
gear. When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
speed, or during acceleration, the clutch automatically
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
and smoothly disengages. The feature is operational in
cause damage to the transmission. The torque conOverdrive and in Drive.
verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from
PARK into any other gear position.
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
The NV233/243 transfer case provides four mode positions:
NV233/243 GII Transfer Case Operating
• Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
Information/Precautions
The NV233/243 is an electric-shift transfer case and is
• Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
operated by the transfer case switch, which is located on
• Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
the instrument panel.
• Neutral (N)
The NV233/243 transfer case is designed to be driven in
the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street
and highway conditions on dry hard-surfaced roads.
Transfer Case Switch
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by turning the transfer case switch to the
desired position - Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for
further information. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
STARTING AND OPERATING
259
positions are designed for loose or slippery road surfaces If one or more shift requirements are not met:
only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW posi1. An indicator light will flash.
tions on dry hard-surfaced roads may cause increased
2. The transfer case will not shift.
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower
left-hand corner of the transfer case switch. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located on the instrument cluster. If there is
no indicator light on or flashing, the transfer case is in
two-wheel drive (2WD). If the indicator light is on, the
desired position (4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW) has been
obtained.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the transfer case switch back to the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for further
information.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
transfer case.
front or rear wheels are spinning. The NV233/243 transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and there- Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
fore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
for the shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
261
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock — This range locks the front and
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low — This range provides low speed
four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, refer to the following infor- N
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear
mation:
driveshafts from the powertrain, and is used for flat
2WD
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Rear-Wheel Drive High — This range is used for normal
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
street and highway driving on dry, hard-surfaced roads.
information.
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine
either running or OFF. This shift cannot be completed if
NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
the key is in the ACC position.
transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
will not shift, the indicator light for the previous position NOTE: On vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock Brake
will remain ON, and the newly-selected position indica- Systems, the four-wheel drive system will not allow
tor light will continue to flash until all the requirements shifts between 2WD/ 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are
for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
return the transfer case switch back to the original position indicator light will flash and the original posiposition, make certain all shift requirements have been tion indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce
speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
met, wait five seconds, and try the shift again.
There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to
2WD-to-4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK-to-2WD
complete after the wheels have stopped spinning.
Turn the transfer case switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with 4WD LOCK-to-4WD LOW or 4WD LOW-to-4WD
the vehicle stopped, or in motion. With the vehicle in LOCK
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW, some
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turngear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
ing the transfer case switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting Procedure – NV233/243 Transfer Case
STARTING AND OPERATING
263
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3. Turn the transfer case switch to the desired position.
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), or completely stopped. USE
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Preferred Procedure
NOTE:
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to • If Steps 1 or 2 of the Preferred or Alternate Procedure
are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, or if they
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
process, then the indicator light will flash and the
current transfer case position will be maintained. To
3. While still rolling, turn the transfer case switch to the
retry the selection, turn the transfer case switch back to
desired position.
the current position, wait five seconds, and retry shift.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
• The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
Alternate Procedure
the key is not ON, then the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
LIMITED-SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL — IF
EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel. It improves traction
when there is a difference between the characteristics of
the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit is
similar to a conventional differential. But on a slippery
surface, the differential delivers more of the driving effort
to the wheel having the better traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground. The vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
STARTING AND OPERATING
265
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become Flowing/Rising Water
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
267
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
STARTING AND OPERATING
269
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot-operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE: The “Brake Warning Light” indicates only that
the parking brake is applied. You must be sure the
parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle.
5
Parking Brake
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the shift lever is in the PARK position. When parking on
a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing
the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK.
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission
in PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that
required with the power system operating.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of braking effectiveness. This will be evident by
increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of the
“Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light”
during brake use.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the Rear-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an The Rear-Wheel ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking conditions.
uphill grade.
The system automatically controls the operation of the
The parking brake should be applied whenever the rear brakes to prevent rear wheel lockup.
driver is not in the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
271
The ABS remains operational in the four-wheel drive
mode. The level of performance is reduced when the
front brakes are locked up. This will cause the rear brakes
to lock-up through the drivetrain, which may reduce the
effectiveness of the anti-lock system.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
During severe braking conditions, particularly with
and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
changing road surfaces, such as ice to concrete, a slight
drop or minor pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal. The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
WARNING!
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
Both Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated
electronic equipment. It may be susceptible to inter- The ABS includes an amber “ABS Warning Light.” When
ference caused by improperly installed or high out- the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
put radio transmitting equipment. This interference system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capabil- the ignition OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the
ity. Installation of such equipment should be done by fault detected was only momentary.
qualified professionals.
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
WARNING!
• Anti-Lock Brake Systems (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition
of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
(Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING
273
When you are in a severe braking condition involving TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
Tire Markings
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
5
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designamolded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING
275
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
277
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is a structural member of the body located
between the front and rear door (of a four-door vehicle) running
from the sill to the roof.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
KPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The max inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire size and the
recommended inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
279
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg)
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150
= 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
STARTING AND OPERATING
281
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE:
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely • The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
calculated in Step 4.
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
manual to determine how this reduces the available
• For the following example, the combined weight of
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
283
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
CAUTION!
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, altire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
consumption.
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
which could damage the valve stem.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
285
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditemperature changes.
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
the Winter.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
and cold tire inflation pressures.
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING
287
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 — Worn Tire
to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 — New Tire
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
factors including, but not limited to:
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu• Driving style
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva• Tire pressure
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
• Distance driven
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
WARNING!
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
You could lose control and have an accident resulting that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
in serious injury or death.
specifications or capability.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• The use of chains is permitted only on vehicles
equipped with P245/70R16 tires.
• Use only “Class S” chains or other traction aids
that meet SAE Type “S” specifications.
• Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires.
• Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
(Continued)
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of
vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your
vehicle.
291
NOTE: The use of class “S” chains is permitted on your
vehicle with P245/70R16 tires.
CAUTION!
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with
tires other than P245/70R16. There may not be
adequate clearance for the chains and you are
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.
• Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of your
vehicle. There may not be adequate clearance for
the chains and you are risking structural or body
damage to your vehicle.
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construction as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if
desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
293
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure (the placard is located on the driver’s side B-pillar).
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and
Operating” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be
no adjustment for this increased pressure.
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire
pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold
for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the “TPMS Warning Lamp” to be turned off.
The system will automatically update and the “TPMS
Warning Lamp” will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the “TPMS
Lamp.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “TPMS
Lamp” will still be ON. In this situation, the “TPMS
Lamp” will turn off only after the tires have been inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance
beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as
damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the tire pressure monitoring sensor.
295
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.”
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of
the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this
occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. The system will automatically update
and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when
STARTING AND OPERATING
the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can
occur by any of the following scenarios: 1) Jamming due
to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting
the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors; 2) Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects
radio wave signals; 3) Lots of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings; 4) Using tire chains on the
vehicle; 5) Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
297
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound
and the “TPM Telltale Light” will still turn ON due to the
low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a non-matching
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
full size spare wheel and tire assembly.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
1. This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitorreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire,
ing sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
pressure in the spare tire.
Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
2. If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
All engines are designed to meet all emisRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sions regulations, and provide excellent
following conditions:
fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gaso• This device may not cause harmful interference.
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
• This device must accept any interference received,
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
including interference that may cause undesired as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
operation.
these engines.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
following licenses:
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
299
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide, have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC), which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country, during the
Winter months, to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline, referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and
are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
Properly-blended reformulated gasolines will provide
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
fuel system components.
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of
Methanol.
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containengine controller memory
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• poor engine performance
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
for gasolines without MMT in Canada, because MMT can
• change the engine oil and oil filter
STARTING AND OPERATING
be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United
States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
(Continued)
301
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully,
loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the
temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel
to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage
may result.
(Continued)
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives which are now being
sold as octane enhancers is not recommended.
Many of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
303
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Vehicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
5
E85 Fuel Cap
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E85.
Ethanol Fuel (E85)
E85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
E85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING
305
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternat- • Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
ing between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recomcompatible with E85 and may form deposits in your
mended.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
When you do switch fuel types, it is recommended that:
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
• you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling
Techron may be used.
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
least 5 miles (8 km)
(E85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formuObserving these precautions will avoid possible hard
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
during warm up.
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
non-seasonally adjusted E85 fuel, you may experience contains additional requirements, developed during exhard starting and rough idle following start up even if tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
the above recommendations are followed, especially Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
Cruising Range
If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel, follow the
Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
CAUTION!
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door. When
fueling, the cap may be placed on the inside of the filler
door.
307
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicle while removing the cap or filling the tank.
(Continued)
Gas Cap Holder
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running. This is in violation of most state and
federal regulations and will cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on
a truck bed. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
NOTE:
• If fuel is poured from a portable container, the con- properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to
tainer should have a flexible nozzle long enough to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message
will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This
extend into the fuel filler tube.
might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving
tank is full.
the problem will turn the MIL off.
STARTING AND OPERATING
309
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Certification Label
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety AdminNumber (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
included on this label and shows the month, day, and
label affixed to the driver’s side door.
hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
VEHICLE LOADING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems. Total load must be limited so that
GVWR is not exceeded.
Certification Label
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a vehicle can carry including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options, and cargo.
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Inflation Pressure (Cold)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Curb Weight
Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
springs, tires, or wheels).
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
specified by purchasers for increased durability do not
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
added.
Tire Size
Loading
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
this tire size.
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commerThis is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exlisted.
ceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING
should then be determined separately to be sure that the
load is properly distributed over front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total
load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be
shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
311
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also, overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight
is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before
TRAILER TOWING
driving.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully rethe brakes operate.
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
you in understanding the following information:
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all rear GAWR.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temWARNING!
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
supported by the scale.
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer is the tongue weight. In most
cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of
the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load
on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
313
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue
weights and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle
dealer
for
additional
information.
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING
315
5
EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of WeightDistributing Hitch (Incorrect)
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be
factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing
over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep
Package. See your authorized dealer for package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Fifth Wheel/
Greater than 10,000 lbs
Gooseneck
(4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
317
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• http:// www.dodge.com
• http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada)
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the
front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle.
Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can
cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will
cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.
5
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
319
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer so that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
(Continued)
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further inforDo not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
mation. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
spare tire.
capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
GAWR limits.
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. For proper
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
tire inflation procedures, refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
information.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation prespersonal injury.
sures before trailer usage.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
required when towing a trailer with electronically
before towing a trailer. For the proper inspection
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
procedure, refer to “Tires – General Information” in
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
brake controller is not required.
Towing Requirements – Tires
−
−
−
−
STARTING AND OPERATING
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
321
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an
accident.
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations:
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING
323
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
TOW/HAUL feature should be selected.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL feature while operating
the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overbefore towing.
heating, take the following actions:
Tow/Haul – If Equipped
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat- − City Driving
ing, turn the TOW/HAUL feature ON when driving in When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transhilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
more severe grades.
− Highway Driving
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
Reduce speed.
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until SNOWPLOW
you can resume cruising speed.
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
maximize fuel efficiency.
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing of two-wheel drive models is not
allowable. Towing the vehicle with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Removal of the driveshaft for towing is not recommended,
since this would allow fluid to drain from the
transmission.
325
Four-Wheel Drive Models
CAUTION!
• Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
• The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL button is
located on the lower left hand corner of the transfer case switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
NEUTRAL can take place with the transfer case
switch in any mode position.
• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK
position for recreational towing.
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
5
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing Procedure
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut the engine OFF.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not
start the engine.
4. Press the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING
327
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, press 10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
the transfer case NEUTRAL button for four seconds.
11. Repeat Steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in
DRIVE.
12. Shut the engine OFF, and place the ignition key into
the unlocked OFF position.
13. Shift the transmission into PARK.
14. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
15. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
NEUTRAL Button
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and
comes on, release the NEUTRAL button.
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
8. Start the engine.
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
longer met during the four second timer, then the Returning to Normal Operation
NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button normal usage.
is released.
1. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
• The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
2. The vehicle must be at a complete stop.
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no 3. Place the ignition key in the OFF position (if it has
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
been moved or the engine has been started).
• Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates 4. Place the ignition key into the ON position (engine
that shift requirements have not been met.
off).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
5. Press the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for one
second.
STARTING AND OPERATING
8. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
329
position indicator lights will flash continuously until
all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button
is released.
9. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
transfer case will shift into the position identified by the • The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place
and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If
transfer case switch.
the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
10. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into DRIVE to
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
verify that the transfer case has engaged.
• Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
11. Set the parking brake. Shift the transmission into
that shift requirements have not been met.
PARK.
NOTE:
• Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until one second elapses and the
shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met
during the one second time, then all of the mode
CAUTION!
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
internal parts.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . 348
▫ Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
▫ Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ To Stow The Flat Or Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
▫ Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
6
332
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the top
of the steering column, just behind the steering wheel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
333
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location
In this vehicle, the scissor jack and tire changing tools for
Extended Cab models are stowed in a compartment
under the rear passenger seat. Crew Cab model scissor
jack and tire changing tools are accessed by lifting up the
rear passenger seat.
The jack is secured in place by turning the jack screw
until the jack is secured into place.
A finger-operated helper tool is provided to assist removal and stowage of the jack. This tool must be
removed to operate the jack for changing the spare tire.
6
Jack Stowage Location (Extended Cab)
334
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Screw
Jack Stowage Location (Crew Cab)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only.
The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for
service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed
under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid
icy or slippery areas.
335
Steps for Removing the Spare Tire
• Remove the jack from the stowage compartment using
the supplied finger-assist tool.
• Remove the finger-assist tool from jack and set aside
until jack is stowed.
• Assemble the jack tools.
• Locate the tire carrier access hole on the rear bumper.
Removing The Spare Tire
• Place assembled jack tool extension rod into the access
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
hole in the direction of the arrow on the bumper trim.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and • Rotate the tool counterclockwise to release and lower
the spare tire to the ground so that it can be pulled
into the winch mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench
from under the vehicle.
handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt
the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the
center of the wheel.
6
336
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• Rotate clockwise to stow the spare tire.
Turning Lug Wrench and Extension
Inserting Lug Wrench and Extension
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
337
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to Tire Changing Procedure
avoid tangling the loose cable.
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Spare Tire Stowage Location
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The scissor
jack is designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle
only. It is not recommended that the jack be used for
service purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
6
338
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid icy or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission).
On 4-Wheel Drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the
4L position.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
339
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6
Jack Warning Label
1. Lower and remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools
from stowage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
(Continued) the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
340
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. When changing a front wheel, place the jack under the
frame rail behind the wheel. Locate the jack as far
forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior
to inboard transition, as shown. Operate the jack using
the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench - the tube
extension, may be used but is not required.
4. When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle in the
positions shown with the drive tubes extending to the
rear. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
Left Rear Jacking Location
Positioning of the Jack Front Wheels
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
341
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To
avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Right Rear Jacking Location
7. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts in
NOTE: Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
a crisscross pattern. The correct nut tightness is 120 to
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck
160 ft lbs (163 to 217 N·m). If in doubt about the correct
parts and adjust the jack position as required.
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
5. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the your authorized dealer or at a service station.
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
6
342
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always stow the jack, tools and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
343
To Stow the Flat or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
into place against the underside of the vehicle. Continue
precautions.
to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click
three times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the
CAUTION!
tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
NOTE: To Stow the Flat or Spare: Wheel retainer does
other booster source with a system voltage greater
not fit through the center of the aluminum wheel. The tire
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
must be stored in a safe manner in the bed of the truck.
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
344
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
When temperatures are below the freezing point,
electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. Do not
attempt jump-starting because the battery could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. Battery
temperature must be brought above freezing point
before attempting a jump-start.
Preparations for Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
Positive Battery Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
345
3. If using a another vehicle to jump-start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
6
346
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and 7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
the fuel injection system.
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
347
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE, while applyfrom the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
ing slight pressure to the accelerator.
10. Reinstall the air intake duct.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine is most effective. Allow the engine to
6
348
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis- hooks.
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continuously for more than 30 seconds.
Tow Hooks
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
349
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use of safety chains is recommended. Attach towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws, applying to vehicles under
tow, must be observed.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
6
350
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the
transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the
OFF position, along with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed
30 mph (50 km/h), and the distance must not exceed
15 miles (25 km).
If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km)
or faster than 30 mph (50 km/h), it must be towed on a
flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front
wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more
than 15 miles (25 km), can cause severe transmission
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Engine Compartment — 4.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 355
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
7
352
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Headlamp (Halogen)/Front Park And
Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps,
And Turn Signal Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp And
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 400
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
353
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Power Distribution Center
— Battery
7 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
354
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Power Distribution Center
— Battery
7 — Engine Oil Fill
8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
9 — Coolant Pressure Cap
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
355
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A “gASCAP” message will be
displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a
⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset
button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,
7
356
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacestarted. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the prob- ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
lem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass do the following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction this test over.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
system is ready for testing.
a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
357
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
happen:
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the REPLACEMENT PARTS
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance and repairs
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
7
358
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
359
minutes after a fully warmed-up engine is shut off, or
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart/liter of oil when the reading
is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading
at the top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the Change Engine Oil
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
best time to check the engine oil level is about five time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
360
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Identification Symbol
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
This symbol means that the oil has
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
been certified by the American
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine CompartPetroleum Institute (API). The
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informamanufacturer only recommends
tion.
API Certified engine oils.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils, provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added to Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
361
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
362
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post, and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+)
positive and (-) negative and are identified on the
battery case.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
363
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected,
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers
or other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres- grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
sor Oils and Refrigerants.
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
365
hood latching components to ensure proper function. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
When performing other underhood services, the hood the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
cleaned and lubricated.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
lock cylinder.
function.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the Adding Washer Fluid
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula- regular intervals. When freezing weather is anticipated,
tions of salt or road film.
flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the
system. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer antiOperation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate the system
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
for a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
7
366
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
367
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
368
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
369
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
Cooling System – Drain, Flush and Refill
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antireliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser and
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty,
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open
a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
370
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the engine coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
(Continued) intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
371
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
the vehicle is operated.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
equivalent.
changes.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra- Cooling System Pressure Cap
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34° F The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine
(-37° C) are anticipated.
coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioncoolant recovery bottle.
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
engine cooling system.
7
372
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance, requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant recovery bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is adequate. With the engine cold, the level
of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the coolant recovery
bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the
bottle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing
the engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant recovery bottle need only
be checked once a month.
373
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
also be protected against freezing.
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
coolant recovery bottle. Do not overfill.
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
Points to Remember
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
and distilled/deionized water for proper corrosion
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporprotection of your engine, which contains aluminum
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
components.
enter the radiator.
7
374
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery Brake System
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
equipped with air conditioning, also keep the front of whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the
the condenser clean.
“Brake Warning Light” is on. If necessary, add fluid to
bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
master cylinder area before removing the cap. With disc
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
pads are replaced. If the brake fluid level is abnormally
emissions.
low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
375
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
7
376
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in an accident.
Automatic Transmission
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a dipstick, use
the following procedure. If your vehicle has a capped
dipstick, it is sealed and should not be tampered with.
Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that
the fluid level is set properly.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 180° F (82° C). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (24 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position, ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70° F (21° C) (room
temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180° F (82° C). Remember it is best to check the level at
the normal operating temperature.
377
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50° F
(10° C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully-seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
7
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
• Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid,
other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid,
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Transfer Case
Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks. If a fluid leak is
evident the transfer case fluid level may be low. Have the
transfer case serviced immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage may result from operation of the vehicle
with low transfer case fluid.
379
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle
Drain and Refill
Rear axle limited-slip differentials require the use of
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
MOPAR威 Limited-Slip Additive or equivalent. Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in Your Vehicle” for further information. This should be
added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
made, when equipped with limited-slip differential. Rear
Axles
axle fluid level should be 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below filler
plug for 8-1/4 in, and 9-1/4 in axles.
Drain and Refill
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Axle
What Causes Corrosion?
Front axle fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
plug.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
• Stone and gravel impact
• Insects, tree sap and tar
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
completely with clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
381
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains,
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to Special Care
scratch the paint.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
a month.
finish.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels be kept clear and open.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
(Continued)
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
7
382
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or
select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use
scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car
washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If Equipped
packaged and sealed.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ner:
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
with a clean, dry towel.
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up-paint to match the color of your vehicle. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or
equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
383
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose Leather Seat Care and Cleaning
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomremove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove mended for leather upholstery.
soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
protectants on Stain Repel products.
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Interior Care
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
upholstery and carpeting.
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva- solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent, your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condiif absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Use MOPAR威 Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery and trim.
7
384
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters, or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may scratch the elements.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
wash them.
directly on the mirror.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn, or if the
buckles do not work properly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
385
FUSES
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it suggests a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distribution center located on the left side of the engine
compartment.
Power Distribution Center
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and
relays. A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
7
386
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
corresponds to the following chart. These fuses and
relays can be obtained from your authorized dealer.
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
30 Amp
Pink
50 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Cavity
8
Spare
Spare
Electric Brake
9
10
Power Seat
11
Spare
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Cabin Compartment Node
(CCN), Radio
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/Fuel/
RAD/AC Coils
12
13
14
15
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
2 Amp
Gray
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN)/Mirror/
4x4
Spare
Run/Start Ignition
Switch
AC Clutch
Trailer Tow Lt Stop/
Turn
Trailer Tow Rt Stop/
Turn
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) #2
Trans/Powertrain
Control Module
(PCM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
Horn
23
ABS Feed (Valves)
24
Fuel Pump
25
Center High-Mounted
Stop Light (CHMSL)
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Door
Locks/Brake Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
Audio Amp
Power Outlet (Switchable)
26
27
28
29
30
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
387
Description
Fog Lamps
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM) B+
Cabin Compartment
Node (CCN) Illumination
Ignition Run/Start
Feed
Power Mirror
Power Outlet
Front Control Module
(FCM) 4 (Wipers)
Spare
7
388
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
31
32
30 Amp
Pink
33
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
34
35
36
37
38
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue
MiniFuse
30 Amp
Green
Description
Cavity
Ignition Run/AC/
Windows
Front Control Module
(FCM) 1 (Ext. Lights #
1)
Auto Shut Down
(ASD)
Front Control Module
(FCM) 2 (Ext. Light #
2)
HVAC Blower Motor
39
Spare
Spare
Spare
45
40
41
42
43
44
46
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Starter Solenoid
Ignition Run Feeds
Wiper Motor
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Front Control Module
(FCM) 5 (T-Case)
Lt Park Lamps
Rt Park Lamps
Trailer Tow Park
Lamps
Airbag System # 2
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Cartridge
Fuse
20 Amp
Blue
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
Description
Spare
Sunroof/Sound Box
Cavity
56
57
Trailer Tow B+
58
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
(Pump)
Park Lamps
Spare
Rear Defogger
Spare
Spare
59
60
61
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
389
Description
Heated Seats
Airbag System # 2
Heated Seats
HVAC Module
ABS Module
Front Control Module
(FCM) 3 (Reverse
Lamps)
7
390
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini- LIGHT BULBS – Interior
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .
• Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw (I.O.D.) fuses located
Overhead
Console Lamps. .
in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The I.O.D.
Reading
Lamp
.........
cavity includes a snap-in retainer that allows the fuse
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Bulb No.
WL212–2
. . . . 921
. . . . 192
WL212–2
to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No.
block.
Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
• The transfer case should be placed in the 4HI mode Front Park/Turn/Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157NA
and kept in this position to minimize the battery drain. Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
• As an alternative to the above steps you may discon- Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
nect the negative cable from the battery.
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlamp (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Signal
Lamps
1. Open the hood
391
3. Grasp the headlamp and pull firmly to disengage the
headlamp housing from the fender panel.
4. While firmly holding the headlamp housing in your
hands, unlock and disconnect headlamp bulb connector.
5. Twist 1/4-turn and remove headlamp bulb from hous2. Remove the three bolts from the front of the headlamp
ing and replace.
housing.
7
392
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The headlamp bulb is a halogen bulb. Take care Rear Side Marker, Taillamps/Stop Lamps, And
not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from Turn Signal Bulbs
your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
reduces bulb life.
sheet metal.
To remove the park/turn signal bulb, rotate bulb socket
1/4-turn and remove socket from housing. Pull bulb
straight from socket.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the taillamp housing straight out from the body.
393
3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the housing.
7
394
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull bulb straight out of socket.
5. Reverse this procedure to install bulb and housing.
Place the two raised blocks past the body.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp And Cargo
Lamp
395
2. Remove housing from the cab.
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body, as shown.
7
396
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove connector from housing tab for more clear- 4. Turn desired bulb socket 1/4-turn and remove socket
ance.
and bulb from housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
397
License Lamps
1. Using a screwdriver, pry black rubber housing from
the bumper.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
• Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
6. Reverse this procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
7
398
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the socket 1/4-turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull bulb from socket.
4. Reverse this procedure for installation.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lamps
399
2. Rotate the bulb 1/4-turn counterclockwise and pull to
remove from the fog lamp housing.
1. Disconnect connector from the fog lamp by raising the
wire harness lock tab and pulling on wire harness 3. Reverse procedure to install.
connector.
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
4.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System (Includes 2.1 Quarts/2 Liters for
Coolant Bottle)
3.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
4.7L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
U.S.
22 Gallons
Metric
83 Liters
5 Quarts
6 Quarts
4.7 Liters
5.7 Liters
7
13.3 Quarts
12.5 Liters
13.3 Quarts
12.5 Liters
400
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.7L Engine
Spark Plugs – 4.7L Engine
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.09 mm])
Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039 in [0.99 mm]) Lower Bank —
FR8T1332 (Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
401
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
SAE 75W-90 Multi-Purpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant (MS-9763) or
equivalent.
SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (MS-8985). Limited-slip rear axles
require MOPAR威 Limited-Slip Additive (MS-10111) or equivalent. Whenever a fluid change is made, 4 oz (118 ml) should be added to the gear
lubricant.
MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake
fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 406 E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 404
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
404
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
C
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
The “Change Oil” message will flash in the instrument
cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emistime since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
individual using any automotive part that has been
illuminated.
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
405 M
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your At Each Stop for Fuel
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichwhile the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
ever comes first.
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
Once a Month
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
as required.
further information.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
406
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake Required Maintenance Intervals
master cylinder, power steering and transmission, and
NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
add as needed.
equipped with sixteen spark plugs, one set is located on
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct the top of the engine under the coils, and the second set
operation.
is located on the side of the engine.
At Each Oil Change
S • Change the engine oil filter.
C
H • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
E
D
CAUTION!
U
L Failure to perform the required maintenance items
E
S may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug, and must be changed every 48,000 miles
(80 000 km).
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug, and must be changed every 96,000 miles
(160 000 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
407 M
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
409 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
411 M
Date
Dealer Code
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
413 M
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve, if
necessary.*
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Replace the side row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Replace the ignition cables (4.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
415 M
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter(s).
❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if you are using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
417 M
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
N
T 138 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate tires.
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if you are using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.7L Engine).
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
419 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
420
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 426
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 424
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 424
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
9
422
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
423
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
424
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
425
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
426
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
427
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
3V9.
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
9
428
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diawebsite or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masgrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practitercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vefor an order form.
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bymanuals (no P.O. Boxes).
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
• Service Manuals
and equipment.
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
• Owner’s Manuals
information that students and professional technicians
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC veLLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
capabilities and safety tips.
and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
429
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
430
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
432
INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 362
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . 237,240
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,364
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,363
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,54,186
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,58,76
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,54
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 49,52,54
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,176
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,399
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,271
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 19
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,176
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,252
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,253,376
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
INDEX
Special Additives . . . . . . .
Torque Converter . . . . . . .
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
378
257
401
379
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,76
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Box, Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,374
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,271
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,181
Brake/Transmission Interlock . .
Break-In Recommendations, New
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
433
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Vehicle . . . . . . . . 74
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
. . . . . . . . . . . 77,390
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,164,302
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86,237
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
10
434
INDEX
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . 356
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,70
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187,189,204,206,209,218
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 371
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369,372
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 370,399,400
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Crates
Rear Convenience Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
INDEX
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,239
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
435
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 138
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 356,404
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,302
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
10
436
INDEX
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,133,174,392
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303,304
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,400
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,399,400
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 55
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,302,366
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,366
Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
INDEX
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 400
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,399
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,400
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298,399
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
437
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,308,355
Gas Gauge (Fuel Gauge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,179
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,298
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310,312
Gross Cargo Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
10
438
INDEX
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 134
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 134
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 148
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,337
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
INDEX
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
17
16
21
12
46
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . 133,174,392
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . 64
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,129
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53,58,76,186
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
439
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390,391
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,180,399
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,142
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10
440
INDEX
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 183
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,133,391,392
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 174
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(LATCH)
.......
.......
.......
. . 64
. . 364
. . 341
. . 122
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 183,356
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Manual Transmission
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INDEX
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357,426
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,52,56
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49,52,54
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,400
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,400
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
441
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,399
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,399
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,356
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,254
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141,142
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 142
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,428
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
10
442
INDEX
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 279
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20,30
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 154
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,268
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Quad Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 369,371
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Rear Convenience Storage Crates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 326
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 328
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
INDEX
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 235
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,67
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
443
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,37,76
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10
444
INDEX
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,176
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 370,400
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . 187,189,204,206,209,218
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,133,174,392
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Sound Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,268
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
INDEX
445
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . 235 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,283,429
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,280
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 174
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 279
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273,283
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
10
446
INDEX
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . .
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . .
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Torque Converter Clutch . . .
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . .
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
292
335
286
287
337
341
317
257
348
311
101
349
317
325
317
101
264
311
324
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,252
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253,376
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,253,376
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 148
INDEX
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,174,391,392
uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Unlock, Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,309
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
447
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . 174
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Weight Load Carrying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,239
10
448
INDEX
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,136,365
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,365
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Chrysler Group LLC
10ND33-126-AB
2nd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.